https://wiki.tqauditor.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&feedformat=atom&user=ArtemTQAuditor Wiki - User contributions [en]2026-06-01T19:32:47ZUser contributionsMediaWiki 1.27.1https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_score_formula:Details_and_versions&diff=4344Quality score formula:Details and versions2024-07-16T08:57:06Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>=='''TQAuditor v3.0'''==<br />
===How Quality Score is calculated===<br />
<br />
In TQAuditor v3.0 the Quality Score formula is similar to MQM score formula https://themqm.org/error-types-2/the-mqm-scoring-models<br />
<br />
The quality score reflects the number of mistakes made per 1000 words of the translated text.<br />
<br />
<br />
'''The formula is:''' <br />
<br />
ROUND(GREATEST(account.score_limit - SUM(mistake_severity.score * mistake_type_spec.weight) / project.evaluation_total_word_count * 1000, 0), 2)<br />
<br />
<br />
'''The formula interpretation:'''<br />
<br />
ROUND(var1, 2) — returns rounded to two decimal places value <br />
<br />
ROUND(GREATEST(var2, 0), 2) — returns "0" in case of a negative value (example: if "-5" then "0").<br />
<br />
<br />
'''Variables interpretation:'''<br />
<br />
var1 = GREATEST(main2, 0) <br />
<br />
var2 = account.score_limit - (SUM(mistake_severity.score * mistake_type_spec.weight) / project.evaluation_total_word_count) * 1000<br />
<br />
*'''mistake_severity.score'''—the mistake severity score.<br />
<br />
*'''mistake_type_spec.weight'''—the weight coefficient of the mistake type per project specialization.<br />
<br />
*'''project.evaluation_total_word_count'''—total source words after the '''<U>[[Evaluation report#General information|Start evaluation]]</U>''' filter is applied (whether with '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Start evaluation (automatic word count)|automatic]]</U>''' or '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Start evaluation (manual word count)|manually entered]]</U>''' word count).<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
'''<span style="color:orange"> Note:</span>''' '''account.score_limit''' is equal to 100 by default, but you may define the highest score limit you need in the '''<U>[[Evaluation settings]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
=='''TQAuditor v2.14'''==<br />
<br />
=== How Quality Score is calculated ===<br />
<br />
<br />
Quality score reflects the number of mistakes made per 1000 words of translated text.<br />
<br />
The formula is: <br />
<br />
Quality score = Σ(mistake_severity.score * mistake_type_spec.weight) * project.evaluation_corrected_word_count / project.evaluation_sample_word_count / project.evaluation_total_word_count * 1000, <br />
where:<br />
<br />
*'''Quality score''' - the number of "base" mistakes per 1000 words ("base" mistake - the mistake that has the severity score of 1 and the weight coefficient of 1).<br />
*'''Σ''' - the sum of products of the mistake severity score and the weight coefficient of the mistake type per specialization. <br />
*'''mistake_severity.score''' - the mistake severity score.<br />
*'''mistake_type_spec.weight''' - the weight coefficient of the mistake type per project specialization.<br />
*'''project.evaluation_corrected_word_count''' - source words in corrected units in the evaluation sample.<br />
*'''project.evaluation_sample_word_count''' - total source words in the evaluation sample.<br />
*'''project.evaluation_total_word_count''' - total source words after evaluation start filter is applied.<br />
<br />
=== How the number of translated words is selected ===<br />
<br />
To make it simpler, let’s make an example:<br />
<br />
Before starting the evaluation, the reviewer selects the number of words to evaluate:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation filter.jpg|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Now imagine that the whole translated text (marketing specialization) contains 3126 words, and the editor corrects the segments containing 2323 source words. <br />
<br />
You select 1000 words sample which is randomly taken by the system out of 2323 source words in corrected units and add 5 mistakes of different types and severities. Two of them are minor punctuation mistakes <br />
<br />
(the severity score of 1 and the weight coefficient of 0.9 for every mistake), and three of them are major grammar mistakes (the severity score of 5 and the weight coefficient of 1.2 for every mistake):<br />
<br />
[[File:QS types and severities 1.jpg|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:orange">'''Note:''' By default, the system has pre-defined quality standards, but you can define your own corporate '''<U>[[System|quality standards]]</U>'''.</span><br />
<br />
As a result, we get:<br />
<br />
'''Quality score''' = Σ(1*0.9+1*0.9+5*1,2+5*1,2+5*1,2)*2323/3126/1001*1000=14,699<br />
<br />
You’ll be able to see these numbers on the evaluation page:<br />
<br />
[[File:QSF result 1.jpg|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
Where:<br />
<br />
*'''Quality score''' = 14,7.<br />
*'''project.evaluation_corrected_word_count''' = 2323.<br />
*'''project.evaluation_sample_word_count''' = 3126.<br />
*'''project.evaluation_total_word_count''' = 1001.<br />
<br />
=== Why is it made that way? ===<br />
<br />
We came to this through several stages of evolution. <br />
<br />
First, the system was selecting just the beginning of the text, and we found out that the translators started to translate first 1000 words better than the rest of the text. So we decided to select the random part of the text. But then the system sometimes selected the pieces containing no corrections while skipping heavily corrected parts. So we changed the logic, and now the system returns the required number of corrections to the evaluator, but remembers how much text it took to find these corrections.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4143Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:25:57Z<p>Artem: /* Create project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4142Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:25:47Z<p>Artem: /* Create project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==<br />
<br />
=='''[[New Project|Create project]]'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4141Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:25:19Z<p>Artem: /* Create project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==<br />
<br />
[[New project]]<br />
<br />
[[New project|1]]<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4140Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:25:07Z<p>Artem: /* Create project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==<br />
<br />
[[New project]]<br />
<br />
[[New project]]<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4139Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:24:41Z<p>Artem: /* New project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==<br />
<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4138Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:24:30Z<p>Artem: /* New project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New_Project|New project]]'''==<br />
<br />
[[New project|Create project]]<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4137Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:24:10Z<p>Artem: /* New project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New_Project|New project]]'''==<br />
<br />
[[New project]]<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4136Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:21:23Z<p>Artem: /* New project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New_Project|New project]]'''==<br />
<br />
[[New_Project|New project]]<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4135Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:21:05Z<p>Artem: /* New_project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New_Project|New project]]'''==<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4134Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:20:50Z<p>Artem: /* New project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New Project|New_project]]'''==<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4133Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:20:36Z<p>Artem: /* Create Project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New Project|New project]]'''==<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4132Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:20:17Z<p>Artem: /* [New Project|Create Project] */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[[New Project|Create Project]]'''==<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&diff=4131Administrator user manual2022-02-22T13:20:03Z<p>Artem: /* Create Project */</p>
<hr />
<div>'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:''' [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]<br />
<br />
=='''About TQAuditor'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Generate a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *provide anonymous communication between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create the translation quality reports at the company:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> have a database of evaluated translations and create translation quality reports both on the scale of an individual and the whole company.<br />
<br />
you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.<br />
<br />
=='''[[Quick comparison]] without signing up'''==<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Quick comparison without signing up -> Quick comparison<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system even without registering an account.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and click '''"Compare files"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]<br />
<br />
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.<br />
<br />
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''"Update selected files"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
'''TQAuditor 3.03''' accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click '''"Supported bilingual file types"''' to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click "[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]" on the "Upload files" page to see all the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Quick comparison details'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can:<br />
<br />
*Delete comparison report if current information is no longer needed:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*Upload other files for a new comparison report by pressing '''Upload files''':<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking "Upload files". An existing comparison report will be deleted.<br />
<br />
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:<br />
<br />
*"Full" — tags have original length, so you can see data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*"Short" — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"None" — tags are not displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
<s>*With '''Units display''' option, you may choose text segments display.</s><br />
<br />
*"All" — units with and without corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*"With corrections" — only units with corrections are displayed:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
<s>Press the "'''Apply'''" button after changing the preferences:</s><br />
<br />
[[File:Apply.png|border|140px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Register an account'''==<br />
<br />
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add translators, evaluators, managers, and administrators to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''<U> <span style="background-color:yellow">[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]</span> </U>''' and press "'''Sign Up'''":<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click "Sign up".<br />
<br />
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the boxes, read our Privacy policy and Terms of service, mark the relevant checkbox and click the '''"Submit"''' button:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Fill in the information, read Terms of service and Privacy policy, mark the according checkbox, and click the "Submit" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Add users'''==<br />
<br />
You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. Each of these options is described below.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.<br />
<br />
*'''Add users manually'''<br />
<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and click the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the "Can log in" checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.<br />
<br />
You may also edit '''<U>[[User details page|user details]]</U>''' by clicking the user's ID:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
There are 4 types of users with '''<U>[[New user#System role|different roles]]</U>''' in the system:<br />
<br />
*'''Translator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator'''<br />
<br />
*'''Manager'''<br />
<br />
*'''Administrator'''<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
*'''Import users from Excel'''<br />
<br />
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''<U>[[Import users from Excel]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only an account owner can import users from Excel.<br />
<br />
When all users are added, you can start working with projects.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''[New Project|Create Project]'''==<br />
<br />
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]<br />
<br />
2. Enter the required information and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. To check the '''<U>[[Project details|project details]]</U>''', select the ID number:<br />
<br />
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Manager can control the project: edit & download files, reassign participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) or delete the project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Only the evaluator uploads the files. Manager may only download them, if needed<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Create comparison report'''==<br />
<br />
After receiving an evaluation request from the system, the project evaluator has to compare edited files with unedited ones.<br />
<br />
1. The evaluator uploads files:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
2. When done, click "'''Create comparison report'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]<br />
<br />
Then you need to start evaluation. There are two types of evaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*"Skip repetitions" — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)<br />
<br />
*"Skip locked units" — the "frozen" units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).<br />
<br />
*"Skip units with match >=" — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.<br />
<br />
*"Evaluation sample word count limit" — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
Click "'''Start evaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===<br />
<br />
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.<br />
<br />
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):<br />
<br />
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.<br />
<br />
1. Click the '''"Add mistake"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''"Submit"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes' classification is done, the project evaluator has to click '''"Complete evaluation" → "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''Complete evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
When you have evaluated all segments press '''"Complete evaluation"''', leave the comment if needed and click the '''"Complete"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
After generating the comparison report, the system sends the notification to the translator, and the translator may see all the corrections done in his deliveries.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Discussion of mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
When the project evaluator finishes assessing the translation quality, the project translator gets an email notification.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reviews the quality feedback'''===<br />
<br />
After the translator has received the email with the translation quality evaluation, the translator should do the following actions:<br />
<br />
1. View the '''<u>[[Comparison report| Comparison report]]</u>'''. <br />
<br />
2. Go to the '''<u>[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]</u>'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator.<br />
<br />
3. Look through the classification of each mistake.<br />
<br />
4. If the translator agrees with the classification of all mistakes, they press "'''Complete project'''". The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage:<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] <br />
<br />
If the translator does not agree with the classification of some mistakes, they do the following actions:<br />
<br />
5. Press "'''Add comment'''" in the box of the mistake that they do not agree with and enter it by clicking "'''Submit'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
6. They send the project for reevaluation by pressing "'''Request reevaluation'''":<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review the comments. The translator will receive the reply or reevaluated project. This action can be done 2 times.<br />
<br />
8. If the translator and the evaluator have not reached an agreement, the translator can send the project to the arbiter by pressing "'''Request arbitration'''" (it appears instead of "'''Request reevaluation'''"):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reviews the translator's comments'''===<br />
<br />
At this stage, the evaluator needs to review all the translator’s comments with objections. The evaluator has the following instructions:<br />
<br />
1. If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake's severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
2. To finish, press '''"Complete evaluation"=>"Complete"'''. The project will be sent to the translator for review.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbiter reviews the project'''===<br />
<br />
Unless the system has been set up otherwise, the translator can return the project to the evaluator for 3 times. <br />
<br />
If the translator and the evaluator have not managed to reach the agreement after 3 attempts, the translator sends the project to the arbiter.<br />
<br />
The user, who was assigned to be the arbiter will be notified by the system.<br />
<br />
The arbiter has to assign a final score on the disputed matters. Look through all the rows where the translator and evaluator disagree. <br />
<br />
If the translator is right, change the mistake’s severity and enter your comment why it has been changed. <br />
<br />
If the translator is wrong, enter your comment why the mistake severity has not been changed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
Finally, the arbiter should press "'''Complete project'''". The project will be finalized and all its participants will receive the respective message.<br />
<br />
[[File:Complete project.png|border|220px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects filters'''==<br />
<br />
For convenience's sake, you may apply different project '''<U>[[Projects list#Additional filters|filters]]</U>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
You may also '''<U>[[Projects list|order projects]]</U>''' by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears):<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|900px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
You can generate various reports in the system. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:<br />
<br />
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:<br />
<br />
*'''Average score reports'''<br />
<br />
Here you may see the average reports: per '''<U>[[Average score per translator|translator]]</U>''' and per translator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]</U>''' and per evaluator company, <br />
per '''<U>[[Average score per manager|manager]]</U>''' and per manager company, per '''<U>[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every translator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Translator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator report'''<br />
<br />
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.<br />
<br />
For more details, please see the '''<U>[[Evaluator report]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
*'''Translator company report'''<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator company report'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
=='''System settings'''==<br />
<br />
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
Each of these menu screens is described below.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Account details]]'''===<br />
<br />
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Clients]]'''===<br />
<br />
The Client menu contains two submenus. <br />
<br />
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select the unneeded client by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.<br />
<br />
==='''[[Languages]]'''===<br />
<br />
The languages' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select the unneeded language by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''"Add"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===<br />
<br />
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select the unneeded specialization by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Services]]'''===<br />
<br />
The services' menu contains two submenus:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span>You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing "'''Edit'''" and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===<br />
<br />
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.<br />
<br />
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''"Edit"''' and uncheck the "'''Enabled'''" box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.<br />
<br />
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''"Create"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standards'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. <br />
<br />
For more detailed information, please see the '''<U>[[Quality standard]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Edit quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Here you may see the list of default <U>'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''</U> proposed by the system.<br />
<br />
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''"update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.<br />
<br />
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.<br />
<br />
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Default time limits'''===<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''Notifications'''===<br />
<br />
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:<br />
<br />
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''"Update"''' to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''<br />
<br />
==='''License'''===<br />
<br />
On this page, you may see your license details:<br />
<br />
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
By pressing "'''Manage license'''" you can manage your license.<br />
----<br />
'''If any questions arise, please <U>[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html contact us]</U>'''.<br />
<br />
'''Good luck!'''<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Default_time_limits&diff=4090Default time limits2022-02-21T14:50:41Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>''Default time limits page: [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/time-limits cloud.tqauditor.com/system/time-limits]''<br />
----<br />
Go to "System" → "Default time limits":<br />
<br />
[[File:Default tiь.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> On this page, you can specify time limits for all the project participants:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|320px]]<br />
<br />
"Complete projects when translator time limit is reached" — if the translator has not completed the project or requested the reevaluation within the time limit, the project will be completed automatically.<br />
<br />
"Evaluator time limit (hours)" — the amount of time the evaluator has to upload files, create the comparison report, and complete the evaluation.<br />
<br />
"Translator time limit (hours)" — the amount of time the translator has to review the comparison and evaluation reports and, if needed, add comments and request the reevaluation.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> if the "Complete projects when translator time limit is reached" checkbox is marked, the project will be completed automatically when the translator's time limit is reached. <br />
<br />
"Arbiter time limit (hours)" — the amount of time the arbiter has to reply to the translator's comments and decrease mistake severities if needed.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> If the time limit is reached, you will see that the project is overdue:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator time limit1+.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Default_time_limits&diff=4089Default time limits2022-02-21T14:50:28Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>''Default time limits page: [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/time-limits cloud.tqauditor.com/system/time-limits]''<br />
----<br />
Go to "System" → "Default time limits":<br />
<br />
[[File:Default tiь.png|border|150px]]<br />
<br />
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''"Update"''' button<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> On this page, you can specify time limits for all the project participants:<br />
<br />
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|320px]]<br />
<br />
"Complete projects when translator time limit is reached" — if the translator has not completed the project or requested the reevaluation within the time limit, the project will be completed automatically.<br />
<br />
"Evaluator time limit (hours)" — the amount of time the evaluator has to upload files, create the comparison report, and complete the evaluation.<br />
<br />
"Translator time limit (hours)" — the amount of time the translator has to review the comparison and evaluation reports and, if needed, add comments and request the reevaluation.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> ::<span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> if the "Complete projects when translator time limit is reached" checkbox is marked the project will be completed automatically when the translator's time limit is reached. <br />
<br />
"Arbiter time limit (hours)" — the amount of time the arbiter has to reply to the translator's comments and decrease mistake severities if needed.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> If the time limit is reached, you will see that the project is overdue:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator time limit1+.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=User_details_page&diff=3432User details page2022-02-07T08:41:27Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>On this page you can:<br />
<br />
*View user details and statistics;<br />
<br />
*Update basic information about the user (name, email, phone number and '''<U>[[New user#System role|system role]]</U>''')<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *Update general information;<br />
<br />
*Resend the invitation to the user<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> *Resend the invitation email if the user is not registered yet;<br />
<br />
*Delete the user.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 user details.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
1. To start editing user data, press "'''Edit user details'''". It will open the '''<U>[[Edit user details page|Edit user details]]</U>''' page.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Press "Edit user details" to edit user profile. For more info, please see the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Edit_user_details_page "Edit user details page"] page.<br />
<br />
2. If a user didn't register, you will have the '''"Resend invitation"''' button.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> If a user didn't register, there will be the '''"Resend invitation"''' button:<br />
[[File:Resend invitation email1.png|border|300]]<br />
<br />
3. To delete the user from your database, press "'''Delete user'''".<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> If you delete a user, all the projects where they participated will be deleted as well. <br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> If you delete a user, all the projects to which they are assigned will be deleted too. <br />
<br />
<br />
If you don't work with a particular user and don't want to lose your data, just unmark the '''"Can login"''' checkbox for them and press the '''"Update"''' button. Such users will not be able to log in and will not appear in the drop-down list while creating a project.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> You can unmark the "Can log in" checkbox and the user will not be able to log in to the system. They also will not appear in the drop-down lists when assigning project participants. <br />
<br />
<br />
[[File:Tq a.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Users]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_standard&diff=3427Quality standard2022-02-07T08:06:43Z<p>Artem: /* Adjust your quality standard */</p>
<hr />
<div>__FORCETOC__<br />
<br />
To get more information on how the score is calculated, please check the [[Quality score formula]] page.<br />
<br />
<br />
''Quality standard page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard view'''==<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Quality standard''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality st.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores, etc. <br />
<br />
But you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards.<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality standard1.png|border|200px]] [[File:Quality standard 3.jpg|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.<br />
<br />
=='''Adjust your quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
==='''Score limit'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the score limit is set to 100. Go to "System" —> "Evaluation settings" to change it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Score limit1.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
Set the needed score limit and press the "Update" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Score limit2.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You can also change a maximum number of evaluation attempts and a default evaluation sample word count limit on this page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> if maximum evaluation attempts is set to 1, a translator will not be able to request the reevaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake severities'''===<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake severities" —> "Mistake severities list" to view and edit mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change a name, score, and description of severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities6.2.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
You can't delete severities in use, but you can disable them. Press "Edit", uncheck the "Enabled" checkbox, and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities6.1.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
Go to the "New mistake severity" page to create a new mistake severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities4.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Fill in the name, define a score, and press "Create":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities5+.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake types'''===<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake types" —> "Mistake types list" to view and edit mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change a name, description, and weight coefficient per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types4.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
You can't delete mistake types in use, but you can disable them. Press "Edit", uncheck the "Enabled" checkbox, and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types3.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Go to the "New mistake type" page to create a new mistake type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types5.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Fill in the name, description if needed, define score weight coefficients per specialization, and press "Create":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types6.2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization'''===<br />
<br />
Different weight coefficients show how much each mistake type affects the project quality score depending on the specialization of a translation. <br />
For example, a stylistic mistake made in a legal translation is more considerable than the same mistake in an IT translation.<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake types" —> "Mistake types list" to view and edit score weight coefficients per specialization.<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change score weight coefficients:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types4.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Go to the "Edit quality levels" page to edit, remove, or add new quality levels:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels1.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
By default, there are two quality levels, but you can add as many levels as needed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Add below" to add a new quality level:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Once the quality level is added, fill in the name, change the "Score to (<)" value, and press "Update". For example:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels4.png|border|1000px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=New_user&diff=3416New user2022-02-04T13:13:18Z<p>Artem: /* System role */</p>
<hr />
<div>''New user page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create]''<br />
----<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 2. Fill in the needed fields and press "'''Create'''" :<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked "Can log in" checkbox can use the system and get email notifications.<br />
<br />
<br />
The system will send a confirmation e-mail to the created user.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The system will send an invitation email to the registered user.<br />
<br />
<br />
When registration confirmed, you will see date and time in the '''Registered at''' column.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Once the invitation is accepted, you will see the date and time in the "'''Registered at'''" column<br />
<br />
<br />
You may also '''Edit user details''' or '''Resend invitation''' (for this, click on the required user ID).<br />
<br />
=='''System role'''==<br />
<br />
[old version] There are 4 types of users with different roles in the system:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Users can have one of the following roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
<br />
1. '''Translator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The translator can:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> *Use the quick compare feature<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View the reports about made corrections and the evaluated translations made by that translator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View the comparison reports and evaluation reports about the projects to which they are assigned.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Add comments about the corrections and send the project for reevaluation.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Add comments regarding the mistakes and request the reevaluation of the project<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View statistical reports about translations quality for that translator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View reports about quality of their translations.<br />
<br />
2. '''Evaluator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The evaluator can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Translator (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span>* Do the same actions as the translator (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Compare the files to generate the report of corrections.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Create comparison reports.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Classify each correction by mistake type and severity.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Evaluate projects by adding mistakes and classifying them by a mistake type and severity. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> View reports about quality of their translations.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View statistical reports about evaluations for that evaluator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View their evaluation reports.<br />
<br />
3. '''Manager''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The manager can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Evaluator (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Do the same actions as the evaluator (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Create and launch evaluation projects.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Create projects.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version]* Edit general information about the project.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Edit general information about the projects.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Assign and change different project participants.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Assign and reassign project participants.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> Add users and edit profile details of existing users.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version]* View statistical reports about the work of translators and evaluators.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View translators' and evaluators' reports.<br />
<br />
<br />
4. '''Administrator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The administrator can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Manager (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Do the same actions as the manager (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Add, edit and remove users.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Add, edit and delete user profiles.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> * Make other manager an account owner.<br />
<br />
<br />
* Define quality standards (e.g. mistake types, scores and quality levels). <br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Define quality standard (e.g. mistake types, scores, quality levels, etc.).<br />
<br />
* Edit system settings.<br />
<br />
* Send messages to users.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version of the "New user creation rules" paragraph]'''</span> <span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only managers and administrators can add new users: the manager can add new users only with translator or evaluator roles; the administrator can add new users with any role. <br />
Only the account owner can add users by importing user information from Excel.<br />
<br />
=='''New user creation rules'''==<br />
<br />
[old version] 1. A new user can be created by the user with the following roles:<br />
<br />
* Account owner<br />
<br />
* Administrator<br />
<br />
* Manager<br />
<br />
2. The user can create a new user only with a role below his own:<br />
<br />
*Account owner—can create users with any role.<br />
<br />
*Administrator—can create users with Manager, Evaluator and Translator roles.<br />
<br />
*Manager—can create users with Evaluator and Translator roles.<br />
<br />
*Evaluator and Translator—can’t create users.<br />
<br />
3. The import from Excel option allows creating users with any roles, so this feature is available only for the Account owner.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Users]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=New_user&diff=3406New user2022-02-04T11:58:23Z<p>Artem: /* System role */</p>
<hr />
<div>''New user page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create]''<br />
----<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 2. Fill in the needed fields and press "'''Create'''" :<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked "Can log in" checkbox can use the system and get email notifications.<br />
<br />
<br />
The system will send a confirmation e-mail to the created user.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The system will send an invitation email to the registered user.<br />
<br />
<br />
When registration confirmed, you will see date and time in the '''Registered at''' column.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Once the invitation is accepted, you will see the date and time in the "'''Registered at'''" column<br />
<br />
<br />
You may also '''Edit user details''' or '''Resend invitation''' (for this, click on the required user ID).<br />
<br />
=='''System role'''==<br />
<br />
[old version] There are 4 types of users with different roles in the system:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Users can have one of the following roles in the system: a translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
<br />
1. '''Translator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The translator can:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> *Use the quick compare feature<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View the reports about made corrections and the evaluated translations made by that translator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View the comparison reports and evaluation reports about the projects to which they are assigned.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Add comments about the corrections and send the project for reevaluation.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Add comments regarding the mistakes and request the reevaluation of the project<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View statistical reports about translations quality for that translator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View reports about quality of their translations.<br />
<br />
2. '''Evaluator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The evaluator can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Translator (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span>* Do the same actions as the translator (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Compare the files to generate the report of corrections.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Create comparison reports.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Classify each correction by mistake type and severity.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Evaluate projects by adding mistakes and classifying them by a mistake type and severity. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> View reports about quality of their translations.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View statistical reports about evaluations for that evaluator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View their evaluation reports.<br />
<br />
3. '''Manager''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The manager can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Evaluator (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Do the same actions as the evaluator (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Create and launch evaluation projects.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Create projects.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version]* Edit general information about the project.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Edit general information about the projects.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Assign and change different project participants.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Assign and reassign project participants.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> Add users and edit profile details of existing users.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version]* View statistical reports about the work of translators and evaluators.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View translators' and evaluators' reports.<br />
<br />
<br />
4. '''Administrator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The administrator can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Manager (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Do the same actions as the manager (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Add, edit and remove users.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Add, edit and delete user profiles.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> * Make other manager an account owner.<br />
<br />
<br />
* Define quality standards (e.g. mistake types, scores and quality levels). <br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Define quality standard (e.g. mistake types, scores, quality levels, etc.).<br />
<br />
* Edit system settings.<br />
<br />
* Send messages to users.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version of the "New user creation rules" paragraph]'''</span> <span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only managers and administrators can add new users: the manager can add new users only with translator or evaluator roles; the administrator can add new users with any role. <br />
Only the account owner can add users by importing user information from Excel.<br />
<br />
=='''New user creation rules'''==<br />
<br />
[old version] 1. A new user can be created by the user with the following roles:<br />
<br />
* Account owner<br />
<br />
* Administrator<br />
<br />
* Manager<br />
<br />
2. The user can create a new user only with a role below his own:<br />
<br />
*Account owner—can create users with any role.<br />
<br />
*Administrator—can create users with Manager, Evaluator and Translator roles.<br />
<br />
*Manager—can create users with Evaluator and Translator roles.<br />
<br />
*Evaluator and Translator—can’t create users.<br />
<br />
3. The import from Excel option allows creating users with any roles, so this feature is available only for the Account owner.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Users]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=New_user&diff=3405New user2022-02-04T11:51:11Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>''New user page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create]''<br />
----<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 2. Fill in the needed fields and press "'''Create'''" :<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked "Can log in" checkbox can use the system and get email notifications.<br />
<br />
<br />
The system will send a confirmation e-mail to the created user.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The system will send an invitation email to the registered user.<br />
<br />
<br />
When registration confirmed, you will see date and time in the '''Registered at''' column.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Once the invitation is accepted, you will see the date and time in the "'''Registered at'''" column<br />
<br />
<br />
You may also '''Edit user details''' or '''Resend invitation''' (for this, click on the required user ID).<br />
<br />
=='''System role'''==<br />
<br />
[old version] There are 4 types of users with different roles in the system:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Users can have one of the following roles in the system: a translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
<br />
1. '''Translator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The translator can:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> *Use the quick compare feature<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View the reports about made corrections and the evaluated translations made by that translator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View the comparison reports and evaluation reports about the projects to which they are assigned.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Add comments about the corrections and send the project for reevaluation.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Add comments regarding the mistakes and request the reevaluation of the project<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View statistical reports about translations quality for that translator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View reports about quality of their translations.<br />
<br />
2. '''Evaluator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The evaluator can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Translator (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span>* Do the same actions as the translator (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Compare the files to generate the report of corrections.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Create comparison reports.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Classify each correction by mistake type and severity.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Evaluate projects by adding mistakes and classifying them by a mistake type and severity. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> View reports about quality of their translations.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View statistical reports about evaluations for that evaluator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View reports about their evaluations.<br />
<br />
3. '''Manager''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The manager can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Evaluator (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Do the same actions as the evaluator (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Create and launch evaluation projects.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Create projects.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version]* Edit general information about the project.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Edit general information about the projects.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Assign and change different project participants.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Assign and reassign project participants.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> Add users and edit profile details of existing users.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version]* View statistical reports about the work of translators and evaluators.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View translators' and evaluators' reports.<br />
<br />
<br />
4. '''Administrator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The administrator can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Manager (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Do the same actions as the manager (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Add, edit and remove users.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Add, edit and delete user profiles.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> * Make other manager an account owner.<br />
<br />
<br />
* Define quality standards (e.g. mistake types, scores and quality levels). <br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Define quality standard (e.g. mistake types, scores, quality levels, etc.).<br />
<br />
* Edit system settings.<br />
<br />
* Send messages to users.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version of the "New user creation rules" paragraph]'''</span> <span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only managers and administrators can add new users: the manager can add new users only with translator or evaluator roles; the administrator can add new users with any role. <br />
Only the account owner can add users by importing user information from Excel.<br />
<br />
=='''New user creation rules'''==<br />
<br />
[old version] 1. A new user can be created by the user with the following roles:<br />
<br />
* Account owner<br />
<br />
* Administrator<br />
<br />
* Manager<br />
<br />
2. The user can create a new user only with a role below his own:<br />
<br />
*Account owner—can create users with any role.<br />
<br />
*Administrator—can create users with Manager, Evaluator and Translator roles.<br />
<br />
*Manager—can create users with Evaluator and Translator roles.<br />
<br />
*Evaluator and Translator—can’t create users.<br />
<br />
3. The import from Excel option allows creating users with any roles, so this feature is available only for the Account owner.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Users]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=New_user&diff=3400New user2022-02-04T11:29:29Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>''New user page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create]''<br />
----<br />
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
2. Fill in all the fields and press the "'''Create'''" button:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> 2. Fill in the needed fields and press "'''Create'''" :<br />
<br />
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note''': </span> Only users with the marked '''"Can log in"''' checkbox can register, work in the system and get corresponding notifications.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:orange"> '''Note''': </span> only users with the marked "Can log in" checkbox can use the system and get email notifications.<br />
<br />
<br />
The system will send a confirmation e-mail to the created user.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The system will send an invitation email to the registered user.<br />
<br />
<br />
When registration confirmed, you will see date and time in the '''Registered at''' column.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Once the invitation is accepted you will see the date and time in the "'''Registered at'''" column<br />
<br />
<br />
You may also '''Edit user details''' or '''Resend invitation''' (for this, click on the required user ID).<br />
<br />
=='''System role'''==<br />
<br />
[old version] There are 4 types of users with different roles in the system:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Users can have one of the following roles in the system: a translator, evaluator, manager, administrator.<br />
<br />
<br />
1. '''Translator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The translator can:<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> *Use the quick compare feature<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View the reports about made corrections and the evaluated translations made by that translator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View the comparison reports and evaluation reports about the projects to which they are assigned.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Add comments about the corrections and send the project for reevaluation.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Add comments regarding the mistakes and request the reevaluation of the project<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View statistical reports about translations quality for that translator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View reports about quality of their translations.<br />
<br />
2. '''Evaluator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The evaluator can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Translator (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span>* Do the same actions as the translator (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Compare the files to generate the report of corrections.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Create comparison reports.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Classify each correction by mistake type and severity.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Evaluate projects by adding mistakes and classifying them by a mistake type and severity. <br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> View reports about quality of their translations.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * View statistical reports about evaluations for that evaluator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View reports about their evaluations.<br />
<br />
3. '''Manager''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The manager can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Evaluator (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Do the same actions as the evaluator (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Create and launch evaluation projects.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Create projects.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version]* Edit general information about the project.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Edit general information about the projects.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Assign and change different project participants.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Assign and reassign project participants.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> Add users and edit profile details of existing users.<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version]* View statistical reports about the work of translators and evaluators.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> View translators' and evaluators' reports.<br />
<br />
<br />
4. '''Administrator''' role allows to:<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> The administrator can:<br />
<br />
<br />
* Do the same actions as Manager (described above).<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Do the same actions as the manager (described above).<br />
<br />
<br />
[old version] * Add, edit and remove users.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> Add, edit and delete user profiles.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new]'''</span> * Make other manager an account owner.<br />
<br />
<br />
* Define quality standards (e.g. mistake types, scores and quality levels). <br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> * Define quality standard (e.g. mistake types, scores, quality levels, etc.).<br />
<br />
* Edit system settings.<br />
<br />
* Send messages to users.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version of the "New user creation rules" paragraph]'''</span> <span style="color:orange">'''Note:'''</span> Only managers and administrators can add new users: the manager can add new users only with translator or evaluator roles; the administrator can add new users with any role. <br />
Only the account owner can add users by importing user information from Excel.<br />
<br />
=='''New user creation rules'''==<br />
<br />
[old version] 1. A new user can be created by the user with the following roles:<br />
<br />
* Account owner<br />
<br />
* Administrator<br />
<br />
* Manager<br />
<br />
2. The user can create a new user only with a role below his own:<br />
<br />
*Account owner—can create users with any role.<br />
<br />
*Administrator—can create users with Manager, Evaluator and Translator roles.<br />
<br />
*Manager—can create users with Evaluator and Translator roles.<br />
<br />
*Evaluator and Translator—can’t create users.<br />
<br />
3. The import from Excel option allows creating users with any roles, so this feature is available only for the Account owner.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Users]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Users_list&diff=3375Users list2022-02-04T09:53:32Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>''Users list page: [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/index/ https://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/index]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
Go to '''Users → Users list''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Usersd list.png| border|150px]]<br />
<br />
On this page, you may find all system users. <br />
<br />
You can order them by particular criteria: click the title of any column and all the users will line up (the arrow [[File:Line up arrow.jpg|border|30px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span>To sort the users by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. When the users are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:<br />
<br />
[[File:Users list with reg date.jpg|border|620px]]<br />
<br />
Different filters help you to search faster. Enter the needed information and click '''"Search"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Filters.png| border|190px]]<br />
<br />
If you need no filtered results anymore and want to see the full list, click '''"Reset"'''.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> To view all the users, click "Reset".<br />
<br />
Here, you may also '''Edit user details''' or '''Resend invitation''' (for this, click the required user ID):<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
For more info, please see the '''<U>[[User details page|User details]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Users]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluation_report&diff=3362Evaluation report2022-02-04T08:17:28Z<p>Artem: /* Automatic vs. manual word count */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''General information'''==<br />
<br />
After the evaluator uploaded files, they can start the evaluation.<br />
<br />
The evaluator can start the evaluation whether with automatic word count or enter it manually when starting the process:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluations.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
For more info on both methods, please check the relevant sections below.<br />
<br />
=='''Automatic vs. manual word count'''==<br />
<br />
'''Automatic:'''<br />
<br />
1. Used for fully reviewed files.<br />
<br />
2. The "Evaluation sample word count limit" is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.<br />
<br />
3. The system will display only corrected segments (selected randomly) with the total word count specified as "Evaluation sample word count limit". <br />
<br />
''For example'', if 1000 was specified as "Evaluation sample word count limit", the system will display around 100 segments with around 1000 words in total.<br />
<br />
::''Please note that the number of segments varies depending on the size of segments''.<br />
<br />
<span style="color:orange">'''Note'''</span>: If the evaluator specifies 1000 as "Evaluation sample word count limit" while there are only 500 words in all corrected segments (let's say, there are 900 words in the file), the system will still display corrected segments with around 500 words in total. It means that ''1000 can be safely used as "Evaluation sample word count limit" even if the real total word count is lower''.<br />
<br />
4. When calculating the score, the "Total source words" from the "Evaluation details" section (not the Total source words of a file) is used:<br />
<br />
[[file:TSW.png|border|300 px]]<br />
<br />
''For example'', if the evaluation report includes corrected segments with around 1000 words and the total source words is 1757, 1757 will be used in the formula. <br />
<br />
'''Manual:'''<br />
<br />
1. Used for partially reviewed files (in order not to split the file into parts and import only the reviewed part).<br />
<br />
2. The "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. <br />
<br />
''For example'', a reviewer reviewed only 1500 words in a 5000-word file. Then they should specify 1500 as "Evaluated source words" and the system will not take the remaining 3500 words into account.<br />
<br />
3. The system will display all the corrected segments. So, if the reviewed part of the file is large, the evaluator will have to evaluate way more segments.<br />
<br />
4. When calculating the score, the "Total source words" is used. In this case, "Evaluated source words" = "Total source words".<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''==<br />
<br />
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation automatic.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
Then you may configure the evaluation process:<br />
<br />
*'''Skip repetitions''' — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*'''Skip locked units''' — the program will hide "frozen" units. For example, the client wants some parts, extremely important for him, stayed unchanged. Besides, extra units slow the editor’s work down.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluation sample word count limit''' — the number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
[[File:Start automatic evaluation settings final.png|border|500px]]<br />
<br />
Having applied the settings you need, press "'''Start evaluation'''" to initiate the process.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''==<br />
<br />
If the file was reviewed partially, you can use the evaluation with manual word count.<br />
<br />
To do this, press '''"Start evaluation (manual word count)"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Start manual evaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words (total number of words in the reviewed part of the file):<br />
<br />
[[File:Start manual evaluation settings 3.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Then press "'''Start evaluation'''" and the system will display all corrected segments of the document.<br />
<br />
=='''Mistakes'''==<br />
<br />
You can '''Add mistake''': <br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
You may describe it:<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|290px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
*'''View in comparison''' — this link redirects you on the page with the '''<u>[[Comparison report|Comparison report]]</u>''':<br />
<br />
[[File:View in comparison.jpg|border|700px]]<br />
<br />
When the mistakes classification is done, the project evaluator has to press '''"Complete evaluation"''':<br />
<br />
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red"> '''Note:'''</span> If you press '''"Complete"''' and no mistakes are added to the report, the system will warn you:<br />
<br />
[[file:Evaluation no mistake are added.jpg|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Markup display'''===<br />
<br />
'''Markup display''' option defines tags display: <br />
<br />
*'''Full''' - tags have original length, so you can see the data within:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Short''' - tags are compressed and you see only their position in the text:<br />
<br />
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
*'''None''' – tags are totally hidden, so they will not distract you:<br />
<br />
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Units display'''===<br />
<br />
*'''All''' - all text segments are displayed.<br />
<br />
*'''With mistakes''' - only with mistakes text segments are displayed.<br />
<br />
*'''Last commented by evaluator''' - only last commented by evaluator text segments are displayed.<br />
<br />
*'''Last commented by translator''' - only last commented by translator text segments are displayed.<br />
<br />
*'''Last commented by arbiter''' - only last commented by arbiter text segments are displayed.<br />
<br />
Press '''"Apply"''' after changing the preferences:<br />
<br />
[[File:Units display.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reevaluation and arbitration requests'''==<br />
<br />
When mistakes classification is done, the project evaluator has to press '''"Complete evaluation" => "Complete"''', <br />
<br />
and the system will send the quality assessment report to the translator. <br />
<br />
When the translator receives this report and look through classification of each mistake, he may '''Complete project''' <br />
<br />
(if agree with the evaluator (in this case, the project will be completed)) or '''Request reevaluation''' (if disagree):<br />
<br />
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review translator’s comments. <br />
<br />
If they are convincing, the evaluator may change mistake severity. The translator will receive the reevaluated project. <br />
<br />
The translator can send this project for reevaluation one more time. <br />
<br />
If an agreement between the translator and evaluator wasn’t reached, the translator can send the project to the arbiter <br />
<br />
by pressing '''"Request arbitration"''' (it appears instead of '''"Request reevaluation"'''):<br />
<br />
[[File:Arb.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Quality evaluation]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Project_participants_reassignment&diff=3360Project participants reassignment2022-02-04T08:12:04Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>Manager can reassign the project participants (manager, translator, evaluator or arbiter) by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 reassigne.png|border|190px]]<br />
<br />
Let's reassign the project manager, for example.<br />
<br />
1. press the "'''Reassign project manager'''" button.<br />
<br />
2. Select the required manager from the drop-down list, and press "'''Update'''" to save changes.<br />
<br />
[[File:Reassigne manager.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> Manager may assign himself as '''Project arbiter''', '''Project evaluator''' or '''Project translator'''.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:red">'''Note:''' </span> Manager may assign themself as '''Project arbiter''', '''Project evaluator''' or '''Project translator'''.<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">'''Note :''' </span>The system role for '''Arbiter''' may be Evaluator, Manager or Administrator.<br />
::<span style="color:orange">'''[new version]'''</span> <span style="color:red">'''Note :''' </span> A user with any role except translator can be assigned to a project as the arbiter.<br />
<br />
For more info on system roles, please see the '''<U>[[New user#System role|System role]]</U>''' page.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Projects]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_standard&diff=3336Quality standard2022-02-03T14:02:12Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>__FORCETOC__<br />
<br />
To get more information on how the score is calculated, please check the [[Quality score formula]] page.<br />
<br />
<br />
''Quality standard page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard view'''==<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Quality standard''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality st.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores, etc. <br />
<br />
But you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards.<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality standard1.png|border|200px]] [[File:Quality standard 3.jpg|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.<br />
<br />
=='''Adjust your quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">This page is not completed yet.</span><br />
<br />
==='''Score limit'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the score limit is set to 100. Go to "System" —> "Evaluation settings" to change it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Score limit1.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
Set the needed score limit and press the "Update" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Score limit2.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You can also change a maximum number of evaluation attempts and a default evaluation sample word count limit on this page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> if maximum evaluation attempts is set to 1, a translator will not be able to request the reevaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake severities'''===<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake severities" —> "Mistake severities list" to view and edit mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change a name, score, and description of severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities6.2.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
You can't delete severities in use, but you can disable them. Press "Edit", uncheck the "Enabled" checkbox, and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities6.1.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
Go to the "New mistake severity" page to create a new mistake severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities4.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Fill in the name, define a score, and press "Create":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities5+.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake types'''===<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake types" —> "Mistake types list" to view and edit mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change a name, description, and weight coefficient per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types4.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
You can't delete mistake types in use, but you can disable them. Press "Edit", uncheck the "Enabled" checkbox, and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types3.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Go to the "New mistake type" page to create a new mistake type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types5.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Fill in the name, description if needed, define score weight coefficients per specialization, and press "Create":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types6.2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization'''===<br />
<br />
Different weight coefficients show how much each mistake type affects the project quality score depending on the specialization of a translation. <br />
For example, a stylistic mistake made in a legal translation is more considerable than the same mistake in an IT translation.<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake types" —> "Mistake types list" to view and edit score weight coefficients per specialization.<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change score weight coefficients:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types4.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Go to the "Edit quality levels" page to edit, remove, or add new quality levels:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels1.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
By default, there are two quality levels, but you can add as many levels as needed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Add below" to add a new quality level:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Once the quality level is added, fill in the name, change the "Score to (<)" value, and press "Update". For example:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels4.png|border|1000px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_standard&diff=3335Quality standard2022-02-03T14:01:59Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>__FORCETOC__<br />
<br />
To get more information on how the score is calculated, please check the [[Quality score formula]] page.<br />
<br />
''Quality standard page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard view'''==<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Quality standard''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality st.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores, etc. <br />
<br />
But you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards.<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality standard1.png|border|200px]] [[File:Quality standard 3.jpg|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.<br />
<br />
=='''Adjust your quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">This page is not completed yet.</span><br />
<br />
==='''Score limit'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the score limit is set to 100. Go to "System" —> "Evaluation settings" to change it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Score limit1.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
Set the needed score limit and press the "Update" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Score limit2.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You can also change a maximum number of evaluation attempts and a default evaluation sample word count limit on this page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> if maximum evaluation attempts is set to 1, a translator will not be able to request the reevaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake severities'''===<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake severities" —> "Mistake severities list" to view and edit mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change a name, score, and description of severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities6.2.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
You can't delete severities in use, but you can disable them. Press "Edit", uncheck the "Enabled" checkbox, and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities6.1.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
Go to the "New mistake severity" page to create a new mistake severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities4.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Fill in the name, define a score, and press "Create":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities5+.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake types'''===<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake types" —> "Mistake types list" to view and edit mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change a name, description, and weight coefficient per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types4.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
You can't delete mistake types in use, but you can disable them. Press "Edit", uncheck the "Enabled" checkbox, and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types3.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Go to the "New mistake type" page to create a new mistake type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types5.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Fill in the name, description if needed, define score weight coefficients per specialization, and press "Create":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types6.2.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization'''===<br />
<br />
Different weight coefficients show how much each mistake type affects the project quality score depending on the specialization of a translation. <br />
For example, a stylistic mistake made in a legal translation is more considerable than the same mistake in an IT translation.<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake types" —> "Mistake types list" to view and edit score weight coefficients per specialization.<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change score weight coefficients:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types4.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Go to the "Edit quality levels" page to edit, remove, or add new quality levels:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels1.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
By default, there are two quality levels, but you can add as many levels as needed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Add below" to add a new quality level:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Once the quality level is added, fill in the name, change the "Score to (<)" value, and press "Update". For example:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels4.png|border|1000px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Projects_list&diff=3334Projects list2022-02-03T13:59:23Z<p>Artem: /* Project list */</p>
<hr />
<div>''Projects list page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index]''<br />
<br />
[[File:Project list.png|borer|120px]]<br />
----<br />
=='''Project list'''==<br />
<br />
On this page, you can the list of the projects. To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. <br />
<br />
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:<br />
<br />
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Additional filters'''==<br />
<br />
[new version] Additional filters -> Project filters<br />
<br />
Also, you may find here additional filters:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Is overdue''' — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*'''Stage''' — tick one of the cells, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Stage''' — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*'''Client''' — the system will display projects only with the specified client.<br />
<br />
*'''Project code''' — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*'''Translation job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID, entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*'''Review job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID, entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*'''Project name''' — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*'''Specialization''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluation count''' — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects with a particular supervisor.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager<br />
<br />
*'''Translator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that performs the translation.<br />
[new version] Translator - the system will display the projects assigned to a particular translator<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that estimates translator’s work.<br />
<br />
*'''Arbiter''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that makes a final decision in dispute situations between translator and evaluator.<br />
<br />
*'''Creation date''' — the system will display the projects with particular creation dates.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Projects]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Projects_list&diff=3333Projects list2022-02-03T13:59:09Z<p>Artem: /* Project list */</p>
<hr />
<div>''Projects list page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index]''<br />
<br />
[[File:Project list.png|borer|120px]]<br />
----<br />
=='''Project list'''==<br />
<br />
On this page, you can the list of the projects. To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. <br />
<br />
If the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:<br />
<br />
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Additional filters'''==<br />
<br />
[new version] Additional filters -> Project filters<br />
<br />
Also, you may find here additional filters:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Is overdue''' — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*'''Stage''' — tick one of the cells, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Stage''' — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*'''Client''' — the system will display projects only with the specified client.<br />
<br />
*'''Project code''' — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*'''Translation job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID, entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*'''Review job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID, entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*'''Project name''' — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*'''Specialization''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluation count''' — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects with a particular supervisor.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager<br />
<br />
*'''Translator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that performs the translation.<br />
[new version] Translator - the system will display the projects assigned to a particular translator<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that estimates translator’s work.<br />
<br />
*'''Arbiter''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that makes a final decision in dispute situations between translator and evaluator.<br />
<br />
*'''Creation date''' — the system will display the projects with particular creation dates.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Projects]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=File:1.2_project_list.png&diff=3332File:1.2 project list.png2022-02-03T13:59:03Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div></div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Projects_list&diff=3331Projects list2022-02-03T13:57:28Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>''Projects list page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index]''<br />
<br />
[[File:Project list.png|borer|120px]]<br />
----<br />
=='''Project list'''==<br />
<br />
On this page, you can the list of the projects. To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. <br />
<br />
If the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:<br />
<br />
[[File:1.1 project list.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Additional filters'''==<br />
<br />
[new version] Additional filters -> Project filters<br />
<br />
Also, you may find here additional filters:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Is overdue''' — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*'''Stage''' — tick one of the cells, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Stage''' — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*'''Client''' — the system will display projects only with the specified client.<br />
<br />
*'''Project code''' — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*'''Translation job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID, entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*'''Review job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID, entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*'''Project name''' — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*'''Specialization''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluation count''' — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects with a particular supervisor.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager<br />
<br />
*'''Translator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that performs the translation.<br />
[new version] Translator - the system will display the projects assigned to a particular translator<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that estimates translator’s work.<br />
<br />
*'''Arbiter''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that makes a final decision in dispute situations between translator and evaluator.<br />
<br />
*'''Creation date''' — the system will display the projects with particular creation dates.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Projects]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Projects_list&diff=3329Projects list2022-02-03T13:49:43Z<p>Artem: /* Project list */</p>
<hr />
<div>''Projects list page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index]''<br />
<br />
[[File:Project list.png|borer|120px]]<br />
----<br />
=='''Project list'''==<br />
<br />
On this page, you can the list of the projects. To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. <br />
<br />
If the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Additional filters'''==<br />
<br />
[new version] Additional filters -> Project filters<br />
<br />
Also, you may find here additional filters:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Is overdue''' — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*'''Stage''' — tick one of the cells, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Stage''' — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*'''Client''' — the system will display projects only with the specified client.<br />
<br />
*'''Project code''' — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*'''Translation job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID, entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*'''Review job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID, entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*'''Project name''' — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*'''Specialization''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluation count''' — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects with a particular supervisor.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager<br />
<br />
*'''Translator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that performs the translation.<br />
[new version] Translator - the system will display the projects assigned to a particular translator<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that estimates translator’s work.<br />
<br />
*'''Arbiter''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that makes a final decision in dispute situations between translator and evaluator.<br />
<br />
*'''Creation date''' — the system will display the projects with particular creation dates.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Projects]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Projects_list&diff=3328Projects list2022-02-03T13:48:39Z<p>Artem: /* Project list */</p>
<hr />
<div>''Projects list page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index]''<br />
<br />
[[File:Project list.png|borer|120px]]<br />
----<br />
=='''Project list'''==<br />
<br />
On this page, you can the list of the projects. To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. <br />
<br />
If the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Additional filters'''==<br />
<br />
[new version] Additional filters -> Project filters<br />
<br />
Also, you may find here additional filters:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Is overdue''' — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*'''Stage''' — tick one of the cells, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Stage''' — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*'''Client''' — the system will display projects only with the specified client.<br />
<br />
*'''Project code''' — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*'''Translation job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID, entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*'''Review job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID, entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*'''Project name''' — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*'''Specialization''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluation count''' — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects with a particular supervisor.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager<br />
<br />
*'''Translator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that performs the translation.<br />
[new version] Translator - the system will display the projects assigned to a particular translator<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that estimates translator’s work.<br />
<br />
*'''Arbiter''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that makes a final decision in dispute situations between translator and evaluator.<br />
<br />
*'''Creation date''' — the system will display the projects with particular creation dates.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Projects]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Projects_list&diff=3327Projects list2022-02-03T13:48:27Z<p>Artem: /* Project list */</p>
<hr />
<div>''Projects list page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/project/index]''<br />
<br />
[[File:Project list.png|borer|120px]]<br />
----<br />
=='''Project list'''==<br />
<br />
On this page, you can the list of the projects. To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. If the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name.<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project list.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Additional filters'''==<br />
<br />
[new version] Additional filters -> Project filters<br />
<br />
Also, you may find here additional filters:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Is overdue''' — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*'''Stage''' — tick one of the cells, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Stage''' — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*'''Client''' — the system will display projects only with the specified client.<br />
<br />
*'''Project code''' — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*'''Translation job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID, entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*'''Review job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID, entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*'''Project name''' — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*'''Specialization''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluation count''' — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects with a particular supervisor.<br />
<br />
[new version] *'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager<br />
<br />
*'''Translator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that performs the translation.<br />
[new version] Translator - the system will display the projects assigned to a particular translator<br />
<br />
*'''Evaluator''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that estimates translator’s work.<br />
<br />
*'''Arbiter''' — the system will display the projects with a particular user, that makes a final decision in dispute situations between translator and evaluator.<br />
<br />
*'''Creation date''' — the system will display the projects with particular creation dates.<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Projects]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_standard&diff=3299Quality standard2022-02-03T07:24:29Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>__FORCETOC__<br />
<br />
''Quality standard page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard view'''==<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Quality standard''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality st.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores, etc. <br />
<br />
But you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards.<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality standard1.png|border|200px]] [[File:Quality standard 3.jpg|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.<br />
<br />
=='''Adjust your quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
<span style="color:red">This page is not completed yet.</span><br />
<br />
==='''Score limit'''===<br />
<br />
By default, the score limit is set to 100. Go to "System" —> "Evaluation settings" to change it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Score limit1.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
Set the needed score limit and press the "Update" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Score limit2.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You can also change a maximum number of evaluation attempts and a default evaluation sample word count limit on this page.<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> if maximum evaluation attempts is set to 1, a translator will not be able to request the reevaluation.<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake severities'''===<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake severities" —> "Mistake severities list" to view and edit mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change a name, score, and description of severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities6.2.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
You can't delete severities in use, but you can disable them. Press "Edit", uncheck the "Enabled" checkbox, and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities6.1.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
Go to the "New mistake severity" page to create a new mistake severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities4.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Fill in the name, define a score, and press "Create":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake severities5.1.png|border|400px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake types'''===<br />
<br />
Go to "System" —> "Mistake types" —> "Mistake types list" to view and edit mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Edit" to change a name, description, and weight coefficient per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types2.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Make changes and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types4.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
You can't delete mistake types in use, but you can disable them. Press "Edit", uncheck the "Enabled" checkbox, and press "Update":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types3.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
Go to the "New mistake type" page to create a new mistake type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types5.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Fill in the name, description if needed, define score weight coefficients per specialization, and press "Create":<br />
<br />
[[File:Mistake types6+.png|border|350px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization'''===<br />
<br />
==='''Quality levels'''===<br />
<br />
Go to the "Edit quality levels" page to edit, remove, or add new quality levels:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels1.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
By default, there are two quality levels, but you can add as many levels as needed.<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press "Add below" to add a new quality level:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Once the quality level is added, fill in the name, change the "Score to (<)" value, and press "Update". For example:<br />
<br />
[[File:Edit quality levels4.png|border|1000px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_standard&diff=3207Quality standard2022-02-01T15:04:05Z<p>Artem: /* Adjust your quality standard */</p>
<hr />
<div>__FORCETOC__<br />
<br />
''Quality standard page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standard view'''===<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Quality standard''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality st.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc. <br />
<br />
But you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards.<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality standard 1.jpg|border|210px]] [[File:Quality standard 3.jpg|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Adjust your quality standard'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
# Score limit<br />
# Mistake types<br />
# Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization<br />
# Quality levels</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_standard&diff=3206Quality standard2022-02-01T15:03:55Z<p>Artem: /* Adjust your quality standard */</p>
<hr />
<div>__FORCETOC__<br />
<br />
''Quality standard page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standard view'''===<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Quality standard''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality st.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc. <br />
<br />
But you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards.<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality standard 1.jpg|border|210px]] [[File:Quality standard 3.jpg|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Adjust your quality standard'''===<br />
<br />
<br />
# Score limit<br />
<br />
# Mistake types<br />
<br />
# Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization<br />
<br />
# Quality levels</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_standard&diff=3205Quality standard2022-02-01T14:17:34Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>__FORCETOC__<br />
<br />
''Quality standard page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standard view'''===<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Quality standard''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality st.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc. <br />
<br />
But you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards.<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality standard 1.jpg|border|210px]] [[File:Quality standard 3.jpg|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Adjust your quality standard'''===</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_standard&diff=3204Quality standard2022-02-01T14:17:20Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>''Quality standard page: [http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs/ http://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/qs]''<br />
----<br />
<br />
==='''Quality standard view'''===<br />
<br />
Go to '''System → Quality standard''':<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality st.png|border|160px]]<br />
<br />
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc. <br />
<br />
But you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards.<br />
<br />
[[File:Quality standard 1.jpg|border|210px]] [[File:Quality standard 3.jpg|border|650px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the '''System''' page.<br />
<br />
==='''Adjust your quality standard'''===</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3203Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:07:40Z<p>Artem: /* Quality evaluation */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press "Start evaluation (automatic word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press "Start evaluation (manual word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started the evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button within a needed segment to add a mistake:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Specify each mistake's type and severity, leave a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add mistakes by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3202Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:07:24Z<p>Artem: /* Quality evaluation */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press "Start evaluation (automatic word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press "Start evaluation (manual word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started the evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button within a needed segment to add a mistake:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Specify each mistake's type and severity, leave a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3201Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:06:52Z<p>Artem: /* Quality evaluation */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press "Start evaluation (automatic word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press "Start evaluation (manual word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started the evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button within a needed segment to add a mistake:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Classify every correction by type and severity, write a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3200Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:05:54Z<p>Artem: /* Quality evaluation */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press "Start evaluation (automatic word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press "Start evaluation (manual word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started the evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Classify every correction by type and severity, write a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3199Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:05:23Z<p>Artem: /* Evaluation with manual word count */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press "Start evaluation (automatic word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press "Start evaluation (manual word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Classify every correction by type and severity, write a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3198Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:04:54Z<p>Artem: /* Start evaluation */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press "Start evaluation (automatic word count)":<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press the "Start evaluation (manual word count)" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Classify every correction by type and severity, write a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3197Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:04:20Z<p>Artem: /* Projects */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press the "Start evaluation (automatic word count)" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press the "Start evaluation (manual word count)" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Classify every correction by type and severity, write a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3196Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:03:16Z<p>Artem: /* Create comparison report */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press the "Start evaluation (automatic word count)" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press the "Start evaluation (manual word count)" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Classify every correction by type and severity, write a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&diff=3195Evaluator user manual2022-02-01T14:01:41Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Introduction'''==<br />
<br />
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:<br />
<br />
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;<br />
<br />
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;<br />
<br />
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;<br />
<br />
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;<br />
<br />
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;<br />
<br />
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by adding a mistake type and severity.<br />
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.<br />
<br />
=='''How to accept invitation'''==<br />
<br />
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.<br />
<br />
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
3. The following window appears:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and press "Submit". <br />
<br />
4. Your account will be created.<br />
<br />
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==<br />
<br />
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.<br />
<br />
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.<br />
<br />
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.<br />
<br />
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.<br />
<br />
==='''Profile settings'''===<br />
<br />
On the "My Profile" page, you can update your personal information and change your password.<br />
<br />
To do so, go to the "My profile" menu:<br />
<br />
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quick compare'''==<br />
<br />
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the "Quick compare" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Click "Supported bilingual file types" to see the file formats TQA work with.<br />
<br />
Press the "Upload selected files" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.<br />
<br />
=='''Projects'''==<br />
<br />
On the "Projects" page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.<br />
<br />
Click on the project's ID to open a project:<br />
<br />
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Project details'''===<br />
<br />
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:<br />
<br />
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]<br />
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Upload files'''===<br />
<br />
First, you have to upload files. Press the "Upload files" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Choose files" button to select two versions of a translated file:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.<br />
<br />
==='''Create comparison report'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the "Create comparison report" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and amended translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:<br />
<br />
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report "Comparison report"] page.<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).<br />
<br />
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Also, you may find additional filters here:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.<br />
<br />
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.<br />
<br />
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. <br />
<br />
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.<br />
<br />
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).<br />
<br />
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.<br />
<br />
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.<br />
<br />
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.<br />
<br />
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.<br />
<br />
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.<br />
<br />
=='''Start evaluation'''==<br />
<br />
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.<br />
<br />
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press the "Start evaluation (automatic word count)" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
You can also adjust evaluation settings:<br />
<br />
*Skip locked units — hide "frozen" units (this setting is used when, for example, a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down the evaluator's work).<br />
<br />
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed in this case).<br />
<br />
*Skip segments with match — a fuzzy match percentage. The program will hide segments with matches greater than or equal to a specified number.<br />
<br />
*Evaluation sample word count limit — a number of words in edited segments chosen for evaluation.<br />
<br />
Press the "Start evaluation" button once settings are adjusted:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===<br />
<br />
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press the "Start evaluation (manual word count)" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the "Start evaluation" button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> Please take into account that the "Evaluated source words" should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].<br />
<br />
==='''Quality evaluation'''===<br />
<br />
Once you have started evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:<br />
<br />
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the "Add mistake" button to do it:<br />
<br />
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Classify every correction by type and severity, write a comment if needed, and click "Submit":<br />
<br />
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]<br />
<br />
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add another mistake by clicking the corresponding buttons:<br />
<br />
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click "Complete evaluation", write an evaluation summary, and press the "Complete" button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.<br />
<br />
Please note that you may '''<U>[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]</U>''' with mistakes classification.<br />
<br />
==='''Reevaluation request'''===<br />
<br />
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the "Project details" page. Next, press the "Evaluation report" button and start reevaluation:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Press the "Add comment" button to reply to the translator's comment:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
::<span style="color:red">'''Note:'''</span> in order to do reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.<br />
<br />
You can also select a "Last commented by translator" option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]<br />
<br />
Once done, click "Complete evaluation", edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the "Complete" button.<br />
<br />
==='''Arbitration request'''===<br />
<br />
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:<br />
<br />
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Reports'''==<br />
<br />
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.<br />
<br />
==='''Translator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your translator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Translator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Evaluator reports'''===<br />
<br />
To check your evaluator reports, go to "Reports" —> "Evaluator report".<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]<br />
<br />
*Score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Monthly average score dynamics:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Managed by:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Projects by specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by type:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
*Mistakes by severity:<br />
<br />
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
==='''Filters'''===<br />
<br />
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:<br />
<br />
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]<br />
<br />
=='''Quality standard'''==<br />
<br />
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to "Settings" —> "Quality standard".<br />
<br />
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]<br />
<br />
Here you can find:<br />
<br />
* Score limit and mistake severities:<br />
<br />
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake types:<br />
<br />
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]<br />
<br />
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:<br />
<br />
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]<br />
<br />
* Quality levels<br />
<br />
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=User_manuals&diff=3194User manuals2022-02-01T14:01:33Z<p>Artem: </p>
<hr />
<div>*'''[[File:Adm.png|180px|link=Administrator user manual]]'''<br />
<br />
*'''[[File:123.png|180px|link=Evaluator user manual]]'''<br />
<br />
*'''[[File:tr.png|180px|link=Translator user manual]]'''</div>Artemhttps://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_score_formula&diff=3021Quality score formula2022-01-28T13:20:28Z<p>Artem: /* Quality score calculation examples */</p>
<hr />
<div>=='''Quality score formula visualisation and interpretation'''==<br />
<br />
[[File:QSF.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
;1. Account score limit<br />
:The highest possible score (100 by default). Can be set on this page: [[https://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/evaluation-settings Evaluation settings]]<br />
;2. Mistake severity score<br />
:Score of mistake by its severity (for example, 1 point for minor and 5 points for major mistakes). Can be set on this page: [[https://cloud.tqauditor.com/mistake-severity/index Mistake severities list]]<br />
;3. Mistake type weight<br />
:Weight of a specific mistake type by specialization. Can be adjusted on this page [[https://cloud.tqauditor.com/mistake-type/index Mistake types list]]<br />
;4. SUM<br />
:A sum of products of #2 and #3 for all the mistakes.<br />
;5. Project evaluation word count<br />
:''Automatic word count'': The value from the "Total source words" field in the "Evaluation details" section (not the Total source words of a file). Please see the [[Evaluation_report#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count|Automatic vs. manual word count]] page.<br />
:''Manual word count'': The value from the "Evaluated source words" field (specified when starting the evaluation with a manual word count).<br />
;6. 1000<br />
:In the end, the result is always converted to 1000, a most optimal value.<br />
The mistake severity scores, mistake type weights, and reports are based on this 1000-word amount. For example, a critical mistake with score of 20 with weight coefficient of 1 reduces the quality score by 20 per 1000 words (by 10 per 2000 words, accordingly, and so on).<br />
<br />
<br />
For more information, please check the [[Quality score formula:Details and versions|Quality score formula:Details and versions]] page.<br />
<br />
=='''Quality score calculation examples'''==<br />
<br />
In the examples below, the following quality standard is used:<br />
<br />
[[File:QS.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
[[File:QS1.png|border|1000px]]<br />
<br />
===Automatic word count===<br />
<br /><br />
;File details&#58;<br />
:Total source words: 3126<br />
:Fully reviewed: yes<br />
:Number of units (segments): 392<br />
:Project specialization - marketing<br />
<br />
;Evaluation settings&#58;<br />
[[File:EAS.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
;Evaluation details&#58;<br />
:Total source words: 1749<br />
:Source words in corrected units: 1002<br />
<br />
'''Mistakes:'''<br />
<br />
# <span style="color:red">'''Major'''</span> ('''<span style="color:blue">3</span>''' points each):<br />
## Terminology: '''1''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
## Grammar: '''1''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>''')<br />
# <span style="color:orange"> '''Minor'''</span> ('''<span style="color:blue">1</span>''' point each): <br />
## Grammar: '''3''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>''')<br />
## Functional: '''2''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
# <span style="color:green"> '''Repetitive'''</span> ('''<span style="color:blue">0.01</span>''' point each):<br />
## Functional: '''6''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
## Layout: '''8''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
# <span style="color:#6C3483"> '''Non-scoring'''</span> ('''<span style="color:blue">0</span>''' points each):<br />
## Style: '''5''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>''')<br />
## Terminology: '''3''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
<br />
:'''Total mistakes''': '''29'''<br />
:'''SUM''': '''1'''*'''<span style="color:blue">3</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''+'''1'''*'''<span style="color:blue">3</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>'''+'''3'''*'''<span style="color:blue">1</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>'''+'''2'''*'''<span style="color:blue">1</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''+'''6'''*'''<span style="color:blue">0.01</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''+'''8'''*'''<span style="color:blue">0.01</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''+'''5'''*'''<span style="color:blue">0</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>'''+'''3'''*'''<span style="color:blue">0</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''=3+3.6+3.6+2+0.06+0.08+0+0='''12.34'''<br />
<br />
<br />
;Quality score calculation&#58;<br />
<br />
Using the [[Quality_score_formula#Quality_score_formula_visualisation_and_interpretation|formula]]:<br />
100-(12.34/1749*1000)=92.94<br />
<br />
[[File:QSA.png|border|300px]]<br />
<br />
----<br />
<br />
===Manual word count===<br />
<br />
<br /><br />
;File details&#58;<br />
:Total source words: 3126<br />
:Fully reviewed: no<br />
:Number of words in a reviewed part of the file: around 1500<br />
:Number of units (segments): 392<br />
:Project specialization - marketing<br />
<br />
;Evaluation settings&#58;<br />
:Evaluated source words: 1500<br /><br />
<br />
;Evaluation details&#58;<br />
:Corrected units: 227<br />
:Total source words: 1500<br />
<br />
'''Mistakes:'''<br />
<br />
# <span style="color:red">'''Major'''</span> ('''<span style="color:blue">3</span>''' points each):<br />
## Terminology: '''1''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
## Grammar: '''1''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>''')<br />
# <span style="color:orange"> '''Minor'''</span> ('''<span style="color:blue">1</span>''' point each): <br />
## Grammar: '''3''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>''')<br />
## Functional: '''2''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
# <span style="color:green"> '''Repetitive'''</span> ('''<span style="color:blue">0.01</span>''' point each):<br />
## Functional: '''6''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
## Layout: '''8''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
# <span style="color:#6C3483"> '''Non-scoring'''</span> ('''<span style="color:blue">0</span>''' points each):<br />
## Style: '''5''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>''')<br />
## Terminology: '''3''' (weight coefficient '''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>''')<br />
<br />
:'''Total mistakes''': '''29'''<br />
:'''SUM''': '''1'''*'''<span style="color:blue">3</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''+'''1'''*'''<span style="color:blue">3</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>'''+'''3'''*'''<span style="color:blue">1</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>'''+'''2'''*'''<span style="color:blue">1</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''+'''6'''*'''<span style="color:blue">0.01</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''+'''8'''*'''<span style="color:blue">0.01</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''+'''5'''*'''<span style="color:blue">0</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1.2</span>'''+'''3'''*'''<span style="color:blue">0</span>'''*'''<span style="color:DarkTurquoise">1</span>'''=3+3.6+3.6+2+0.06+0.08+0+0='''12.34'''<br />
<br />
<br />
;Quality score calculation&#58;<br />
Using the [[Quality_score_formula#Quality_score_formula_visualisation_and_interpretation|formula]]:<br />
100-(12.34/1500*1000)=91.77<br />
<br />
[[File:QSM.png|border|300px]]</div>Artem